[AArch64] Adjust layout emultempl/aarch64elf.em.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 @kindex -Ur
977 @cindex constructors
978 @item -Ur
979 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
981 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
982 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986 @samp{-r} for the others.
987
988 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996 in a linker script.
997
998 @kindex -v
999 @kindex -V
1000 @kindex --version
1001 @cindex version
1002 @item -v
1003 @itemx --version
1004 @itemx -V
1005 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1006 lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008 @kindex -x
1009 @kindex --discard-all
1010 @cindex deleting local symbols
1011 @item -x
1012 @itemx --discard-all
1013 Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015 @kindex -X
1016 @kindex --discard-locals
1017 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1018 @item -X
1019 @itemx --discard-locals
1020 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1023
1024 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026 @cindex symbol tracing
1027 @item -y @var{symbol}
1028 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031 to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1037 @item -Y @var{path}
1038 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039 for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042 @item -z @var{keyword}
1043 The recognized keywords are:
1044 @table @samp
1045
1046 @item combreloc
1047 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048 lookup caching possible.
1049
1050 @item defs
1051 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1052 shared libraries are still allowed.
1053
1054 @item execstack
1055 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
1057 @item global
1058 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
1062 @item initfirst
1063 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068 objects.
1069
1070 @item interpose
1071 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072 but the primary executable.
1073
1074 @item lazy
1075 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078 Lazy binding is the default.
1079
1080 @item loadfltr
1081 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082 runtime.
1083
1084 @item muldefs
1085 Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087 @item nocombreloc
1088 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090 @item nocopyreloc
1091 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1092 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1093
1094 @item nodefaultlib
1095 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1096 ignore any default library search paths.
1097
1098 @item nodelete
1099 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1100
1101 @item nodlopen
1102 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1103
1104 @item nodump
1105 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1106
1107 @item noexecstack
1108 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1109
1110 @item text
1111 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1112
1113 @item notext
1114 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1115
1116 @item textoff
1117 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1118
1119 @item norelro
1120 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1121
1122 @item now
1123 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1124 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1125 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1126 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1127 first called.
1128
1129 @item origin
1130 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1131
1132 @item relro
1133 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1134
1135 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1136 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1137
1138 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1139 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1140
1141 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1142 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1143 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1144 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1145
1146 @item bndplt
1147 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1148
1149 @end table
1150
1151 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1152
1153 @kindex -(
1154 @cindex groups of archives
1155 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1156 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1157 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1158 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1159
1160 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1161 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1162 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1163 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1164 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1165 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1166 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1167 resolved.
1168
1169 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1170 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1171 more archives.
1172
1173 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1174 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1175 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1176 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1177 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1178 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1179 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1180 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1181 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1182 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1183 restore the old behaviour.
1184
1185 @kindex --as-needed
1186 @kindex --no-as-needed
1187 @item --as-needed
1188 @itemx --no-as-needed
1189 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1190 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1191 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1192 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1193 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1194 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1195 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1196 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1197 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1198 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1199 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1200 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1201 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1202
1203 @kindex --add-needed
1204 @kindex --no-add-needed
1205 @item --add-needed
1206 @itemx --no-add-needed
1207 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1208 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1209 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1210 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1211
1212 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1213 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1214 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1215
1216 @kindex -Bdynamic
1217 @kindex -dy
1218 @kindex -call_shared
1219 @item -Bdynamic
1220 @itemx -dy
1221 @itemx -call_shared
1222 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1223 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1224 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1225 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1226 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1227 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1228
1229 @kindex -Bgroup
1230 @item -Bgroup
1231 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1232 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1233 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1234 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1235 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1236
1237 @kindex -Bstatic
1238 @kindex -dn
1239 @kindex -non_shared
1240 @kindex -static
1241 @item -Bstatic
1242 @itemx -dn
1243 @itemx -non_shared
1244 @itemx -static
1245 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1246 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1247 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1248 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1249 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1250 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1251 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1252 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1253 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1254 libraries.
1255
1256 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1257 @item -Bsymbolic
1258 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1259 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1260 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1261 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1262 platforms which support shared libraries.
1263
1264 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1265 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1266 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1267 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1268 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1269 libraries.
1270
1271 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1272 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1273 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1274 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1275 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1276 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1277 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1278 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1279 which support shared libraries.
1280
1281 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1282 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1283
1284 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1285 @item --dynamic-list-data
1286 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1287
1288 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1289 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1290 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1291 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1292
1293 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1294 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1295 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1296
1297 @kindex --check-sections
1298 @kindex --no-check-sections
1299 @item --check-sections
1300 @itemx --no-check-sections
1301 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1302 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1303 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1304 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1305 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1306 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1307 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1308 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1309 option.
1310
1311 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1312 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1313 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1314 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1315 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1316 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1317 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1318 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1319 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1320 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1321 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1322 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1323
1324 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1325 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1326 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1327 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1328 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1329 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1330 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1331 symbols.
1332
1333 @cindex cross reference table
1334 @kindex --cref
1335 @item --cref
1336 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1337 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1338 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1339
1340 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1341 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1342 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1343 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1344 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1345 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1346 symbol are listed.
1347
1348 @cindex common allocation
1349 @kindex --no-define-common
1350 @item --no-define-common
1351 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1352 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1353 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1354
1355 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1356 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1357 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1358 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1359 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1360 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1361 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1362 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1363 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1364 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1365
1366 @cindex symbols, from command line
1367 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1368 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1369 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1370 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1371 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1372 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1373 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1374 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1375 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1376 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1377 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1378 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1379
1380 @cindex demangling, from command line
1381 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1382 @kindex --no-demangle
1383 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1384 @itemx --no-demangle
1385 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1386 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1387 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1388 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1389 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1390 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1391 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1392 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1393 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1394
1395 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1396 @kindex -I@var{file}
1397 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1398 @item -I@var{file}
1399 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1400 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1401 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1402 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1403 doing.
1404
1405 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1406 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1407 @item --fatal-warnings
1408 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1409 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1410 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1411
1412 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1413 @item --force-exe-suffix
1414 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1415
1416 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1417 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1418 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1419 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1420 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1421 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1422
1423 @kindex --gc-sections
1424 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1425 @cindex garbage collection
1426 @item --gc-sections
1427 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1428 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1429 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1430 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1431 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1432
1433 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1434 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1435 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1436 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1437 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1438 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1439 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1440 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1441 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1442
1443 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1444 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1445 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1446 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1447
1448 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1449 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1450 @cindex garbage collection
1451 @item --print-gc-sections
1452 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1453 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1454 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1455 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1456 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1457 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1458 line.
1459
1460 @kindex --print-output-format
1461 @cindex output format
1462 @item --print-output-format
1463 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1464 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1465 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1466
1467 @cindex help
1468 @cindex usage
1469 @kindex --help
1470 @item --help
1471 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1472
1473 @kindex --target-help
1474 @item --target-help
1475 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1476
1477 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1478 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1479 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1480 @option{-M} option, above.
1481
1482 @cindex memory usage
1483 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1484 @item --no-keep-memory
1485 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1486 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1487 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1488 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1489 while linking a large executable.
1490
1491 @kindex --no-undefined
1492 @kindex -z defs
1493 @item --no-undefined
1494 @itemx -z defs
1495 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1496 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1497 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1498 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1499 libraries being linked in.
1500
1501 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1502 @kindex -z muldefs
1503 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1504 @itemx -z muldefs
1505 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1506 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1507 first definition will be used.
1508
1509 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1510 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1511 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1512 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1513 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1514 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1515 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1516 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1517 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1518
1519 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1520 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1521 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1522 a shared library.
1523
1524 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1525 libraries specified at link time are that:
1526
1527 @itemize @bullet
1528 @item
1529 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1530 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1531 resolvable at load time.
1532 @item
1533 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1534 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1535
1536 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1537 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1538 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1539 appropriate memset function.
1540 @end itemize
1541
1542 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1543 @item --no-undefined-version
1544 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1545 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1546 will be issued instead.
1547
1548 @kindex --default-symver
1549 @item --default-symver
1550 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1551 exported symbols.
1552
1553 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1554 @item --default-imported-symver
1555 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1556 imported symbols.
1557
1558 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1559 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1560 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1561 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1562 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1563 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1564 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1565 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1566 inappropriate.
1567
1568 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1569 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1570 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1571 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1572
1573 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1574 @item --no-whole-archive
1575 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1576 archive files.
1577
1578 @cindex output file after errors
1579 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1580 @item --noinhibit-exec
1581 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1582 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1583 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1584 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1585
1586 @kindex -nostdlib
1587 @item -nostdlib
1588 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1589 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1590 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1591
1592 @ifclear SingleFormat
1593 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1594 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1595 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1596 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1597 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1598 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1599 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1600 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1601 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1602 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1603 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1604 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1605 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1606 @end ifclear
1607
1608 @kindex -pie
1609 @kindex --pic-executable
1610 @item -pie
1611 @itemx --pic-executable
1612 @cindex position independent executables
1613 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1614 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1615 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1616 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1617 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1618 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1619
1620 @kindex -qmagic
1621 @item -qmagic
1622 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1623
1624 @kindex -Qy
1625 @item -Qy
1626 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1627
1628 @kindex --relax
1629 @cindex synthesizing linker
1630 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1631 @cindex --no-relax
1632 @item --relax
1633 @itemx --no-relax
1634 An option with machine dependent effects.
1635 @ifset GENERIC
1636 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1637 @end ifset
1638 @ifset H8300
1639 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1640 @end ifset
1641 @ifset I960
1642 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1643 @end ifset
1644 @ifset XTENSA
1645 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1646 @end ifset
1647 @ifset M68HC11
1648 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1649 @end ifset
1650 @ifset NIOSII
1651 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1652 @end ifset
1653 @ifset POWERPC
1654 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1655 @end ifset
1656
1657 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1658 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1659 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1660 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1661 instructions, and combining constant values.
1662
1663 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1664 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1665 @ifset GENERIC
1666 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1667 family of processors.
1668 @end ifset
1669
1670 @ifset GENERIC
1671 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1672 but ignored.
1673 @end ifset
1674
1675 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1676 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1677
1678 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1679 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1680 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1681 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1682 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1683 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1684 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1685 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1686 @ifset GENERIC
1687 (such as VxWorks)
1688 @end ifset
1689 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1690 run-time memory.
1691
1692 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1693 or symbols needed for relocations.
1694
1695 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1696 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1697
1698 @ifset GENERIC
1699 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1700 @cindex runtime library search path
1701 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1702 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1703 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1704 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1705 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1706 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1707 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1708 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1709 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1710 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1711
1712 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1713 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1714 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1715 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1716 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1717 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1718 file systems.
1719
1720 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1721 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1722 the @option{-rpath} option.
1723 @end ifset
1724
1725 @ifset GENERIC
1726 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1727 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1728 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1729 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1730 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1731 of the input files.
1732
1733 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1734 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1735 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1736 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1737 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1738 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1739 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1740 appearing multiple times.
1741
1742 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1743 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1744 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1745 runtime linker would do.
1746
1747 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1748 libraries:
1749 @enumerate
1750 @item
1751 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1752 @item
1753 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1754 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1755 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1756 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1757 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1758 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1759 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1760 @item
1761 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1762 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1763 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1764 @item
1765 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1766 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1767 @item
1768 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1769 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1770 @item
1771 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1772 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1773 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1774 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1775 @item
1776 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1777 @item
1778 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1779 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1780 @end enumerate
1781
1782 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1783 warning and continue with the link.
1784 @end ifset
1785
1786 @kindex -shared
1787 @kindex -Bshareable
1788 @item -shared
1789 @itemx -Bshareable
1790 @cindex shared libraries
1791 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1792 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1793 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1794 undefined symbols in the link.
1795
1796 @kindex --sort-common
1797 @item --sort-common
1798 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1799 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1800 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1801 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1802 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1803 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1804 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1805 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1806
1807 @kindex --sort-section=name
1808 @item --sort-section=name
1809 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1810 patterns in the linker script.
1811
1812 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1813 @item --sort-section=alignment
1814 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1815 patterns in the linker script.
1816
1817 @kindex --split-by-file
1818 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1819 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1820 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1821 size of 1 if not given.
1822
1823 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1824 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1825 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1826 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1827 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1828 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1829 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1830 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1831 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1832 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1833 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1834 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1835
1836 @kindex --stats
1837 @item --stats
1838 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1839 as execution time and memory usage.
1840
1841 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1842 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1843 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1844 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1845 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1846
1847 @kindex --traditional-format
1848 @cindex traditional format
1849 @item --traditional-format
1850 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1851 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1852 use the traditional format instead.
1853
1854 @cindex dbx
1855 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1856 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1857 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1858 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1859 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1860 combine duplicate entries.
1861
1862 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1863 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1864 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1865 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1866 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1867 line.
1868 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1869 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1870 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1871 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1872 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1873
1874 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1875 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1876 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1877 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1878 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1879 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1880 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1881 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1882 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1883
1884 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1885 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1886 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1887 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1888 byte of the text segment.
1889
1890 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1891 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1892 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1893 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1894 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1895 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1896
1897 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1898 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1899 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1900 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1901 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1902
1903 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1904 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1905 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1906 values for @samp{method}:
1907
1908 @table @samp
1909 @item ignore-all
1910 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1911
1912 @item report-all
1913 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1914
1915 @item ignore-in-object-files
1916 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1917 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1918
1919 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1920 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1921 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1922 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1923 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1924 command line.
1925 @end table
1926
1927 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1928 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1929
1930 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1931 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1932 can change this to a warning.
1933
1934 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1935 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1936 @item --dll-verbose
1937 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1938 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1939 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1940 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1941 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1942
1943 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1944 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1945 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1946 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1947 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1948 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1949 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1950 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1951 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1952 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1953 @xref{WIN32}.
1954
1955 @kindex --warn-common
1956 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1957 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1958 @item --warn-common
1959 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1960 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1961 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1962 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1963 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1964 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1965
1966 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1967
1968 @table @samp
1969 @item int i = 1;
1970 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1971 file.
1972
1973 @item extern int i;
1974 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1975 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1976 variable somewhere.
1977
1978 @item int i;
1979 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1980 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1981 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1982 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1983 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1984 a definition of the same variable.
1985 @end table
1986
1987 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1988 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1989 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1990 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1991 a common symbol.
1992
1993 @enumerate
1994 @item
1995 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1996 definition for the symbol.
1997 @smallexample
1998 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1999 overridden by definition
2000 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2001 @end smallexample
2002
2003 @item
2004 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2005 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2006 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2007 @smallexample
2008 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2009 overriding common
2010 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2011 @end smallexample
2012
2013 @item
2014 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2015 @smallexample
2016 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2017 of `@var{symbol}'
2018 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2019 @end smallexample
2020
2021 @item
2022 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2023 @smallexample
2024 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2025 overridden by larger common
2026 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2027 @end smallexample
2028
2029 @item
2030 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2031 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2032 encountered in a different order.
2033 @smallexample
2034 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2035 overriding smaller common
2036 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2037 @end smallexample
2038 @end enumerate
2039
2040 @kindex --warn-constructors
2041 @item --warn-constructors
2042 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2043 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2044 detect the use of global constructors.
2045
2046 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2047 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2048 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2049 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2050 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2051 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2052 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2053 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2054 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2055 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2056 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2057 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2058 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2059
2060 @kindex --warn-once
2061 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2062 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2063 @item --warn-once
2064 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2065 which refers to it.
2066
2067 @kindex --warn-section-align
2068 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2069 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2070 @item --warn-section-align
2071 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2072 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2073 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2074 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2075 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2076
2077 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2078 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2079 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2080
2081 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2082 @item --warn-alternate-em
2083 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2084
2085 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2086 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2087 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2088 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2089 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2090
2091 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2092 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2093 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2094 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2095
2096 @kindex --whole-archive
2097 @cindex including an entire archive
2098 @item --whole-archive
2099 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2100 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2101 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2102 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2103 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2104 library. This option may be used more than once.
2105
2106 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2107 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2108 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2109 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2110 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2111
2112 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2113 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2114 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2115 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2116 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2117 @var{symbol}.
2118
2119 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2120 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2121 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2122 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2123
2124 Here is a trivial example:
2125
2126 @smallexample
2127 void *
2128 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2129 @{
2130 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2131 return __real_malloc (c);
2132 @}
2133 @end smallexample
2134
2135 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2136 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2137 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2138 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2139
2140 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2141 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2142 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2143 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2144 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2145
2146 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2147 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2148 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2149 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2150
2151 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2152 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2153 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2154 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2155 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2156
2157 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2158 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2159 @item --enable-new-dtags
2160 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2161 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2162 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2163 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2164 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2165 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2166 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2167 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2168
2169 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2170 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2171 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2172 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2173 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2174 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2175 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2176
2177 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2178 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2179 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2180 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2181 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2182 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2183 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2184
2185 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2186 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2187 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2188 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2189 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2190 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2191
2192 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2193 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2194 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2195 has been used.
2196
2197 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2198 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2199
2200 @kindex --build-id
2201 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2202 @item --build-id
2203 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2204 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2205 or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2206 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2207 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2208 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2209 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2210 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2211 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2212 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2213 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2214
2215 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2216 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2217 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2218 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2219 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2220 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2221
2222 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2223 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2224 @end table
2225
2226 @c man end
2227
2228 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2229
2230 @c man begin OPTIONS
2231
2232 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2233 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2234 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2235 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2236 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2237 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2238 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2239 object file).
2240
2241 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2242 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2243 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2244 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2245
2246 @table @gcctabopt
2247
2248 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2249 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2250 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2251 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2252 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2253
2254 @kindex --base-file
2255 @item --base-file @var{file}
2256 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2257 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2258 @file{dlltool}.
2259 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2260
2261 @kindex --dll
2262 @item --dll
2263 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2264 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2265 file.
2266 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2267
2268 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2269 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2270 @item --enable-long-section-names
2271 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2272 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2273 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2274 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2275 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2276 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2277 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2278 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2279 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2280 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2281 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2282 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2283 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2284 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2285 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2286 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2287 image and not stripping symbols.
2288 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2289
2290 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2291 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2292 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2293 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2294 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2295 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2296 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2297 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2298 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2299 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2300 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2301 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2302 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2303 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2304 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2305 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2306 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2307 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2308
2309 @kindex --leading-underscore
2310 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2311 @item --leading-underscore
2312 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2313 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2314 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2315 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2316
2317 @cindex DLLs, creating
2318 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2319 @item --export-all-symbols
2320 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2321 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2322 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2323 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2324 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2325 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2326 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2327 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2328 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2329 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2330 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2331 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2332 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2333 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2334 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2335 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2336 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2337 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2338 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2339 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2340 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2341 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2342 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2343
2344 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2345 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2346 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2347 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2348 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2349
2350 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2351 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2352 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2353 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2354
2355 @kindex --file-alignment
2356 @item --file-alignment
2357 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2358 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2359 512.
2360 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2361
2362 @cindex heap size
2363 @kindex --heap
2364 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2365 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2366 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2367 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2368 committed.
2369 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2370
2371 @cindex image base
2372 @kindex --image-base
2373 @item --image-base @var{value}
2374 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2375 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2376 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2377 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2378 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2379 for dlls.
2380 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2381
2382 @kindex --kill-at
2383 @item --kill-at
2384 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2385 symbols before they are exported.
2386 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2387
2388 @kindex --large-address-aware
2389 @item --large-address-aware
2390 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2391 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2392 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2393 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2394 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2395 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2396
2397 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2398 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2399 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2400 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2401 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2402 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2403 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2404
2405 @kindex --major-image-version
2406 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2407 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2408 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2409
2410 @kindex --major-os-version
2411 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2412 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2413 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2414
2415 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2416 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2417 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2418 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2419
2420 @kindex --minor-image-version
2421 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2422 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2423 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2424
2425 @kindex --minor-os-version
2426 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2427 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2428 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2429
2430 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2431 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2432 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2433 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2434
2435 @cindex DEF files, creating
2436 @cindex DLLs, creating
2437 @kindex --output-def
2438 @item --output-def @var{file}
2439 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2440 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2441 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2442 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2443 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2444 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2445
2446 @cindex DLLs, creating
2447 @kindex --out-implib
2448 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2449 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2450 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2451 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2452 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2453 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2454 creation step.
2455 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2456
2457 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2458 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2459 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2460 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2461 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2462 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2463 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2464 execution are avoided.
2465 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2466
2467 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2468 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2469 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2470 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2471 default.
2472 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2473
2474 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2475 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2476 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2477 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2478 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2479 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2480 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2481 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2482 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2483 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2484
2485 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2486 @item --enable-auto-import
2487 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2488 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2489 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2490 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2491 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2492 specification published by Microsoft.
2493
2494 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2495 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2496 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2497 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2498 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2499
2500 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2501 see this message:
2502
2503 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2504 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2505
2506 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2507 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2508 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2509 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2510 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2511 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2512 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2513 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2514 the warning, and exit.
2515
2516 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2517 data type of the exported variable:
2518
2519 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2520 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2521 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2522
2523 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2524 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2525 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2526 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2527
2528 @example
2529 extern type extern_array[];
2530 extern_array[1] -->
2531 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2532 @end example
2533
2534 or
2535
2536 @example
2537 extern type extern_array[];
2538 extern_array[1] -->
2539 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2540 @end example
2541
2542 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2543 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2544
2545 @example
2546 extern struct s extern_struct;
2547 extern_struct.field -->
2548 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2549 @end example
2550
2551 or
2552
2553 @example
2554 extern long long extern_ll;
2555 extern_ll -->
2556 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2557 @end example
2558
2559 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2560 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2561 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2562 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2563 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2564 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2565 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2566 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2567
2568 Original:
2569 @example
2570 --foo.h
2571 extern int arr[];
2572 --foo.c
2573 #include "foo.h"
2574 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2575 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2576 @}
2577 @end example
2578
2579 Solution 1:
2580 @example
2581 --foo.h
2582 extern int arr[];
2583 --foo.c
2584 #include "foo.h"
2585 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2586 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2587 volatile int *parr = arr;
2588 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2589 @}
2590 @end example
2591
2592 Solution 2:
2593 @example
2594 --foo.h
2595 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2596 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2597 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2598 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2599 #else
2600 #define FOO_IMPORT
2601 #endif
2602 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2603 --foo.c
2604 #include "foo.h"
2605 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2606 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2607 @}
2608 @end example
2609
2610 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2611 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2612 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2613 functions).
2614 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2615
2616 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2617 @item --disable-auto-import
2618 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2619 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2620 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2621
2622 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2623 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2624 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2625 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2626 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2627 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2628 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2629
2630 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2631 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2632 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2633 DLLs.
2634 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2635
2636 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2637 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2638 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2639 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2640
2641 @kindex --section-alignment
2642 @item --section-alignment
2643 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2644 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2645 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2646
2647 @cindex stack size
2648 @kindex --stack
2649 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2650 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2651 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2652 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2653 committed.
2654 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2655
2656 @kindex --subsystem
2657 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2658 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2659 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2660 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2661 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2662 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2663 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2664 @var{which}.
2665 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2666
2667 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2668 of the PE file header:
2669 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2670
2671 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2672 @item --high-entropy-va
2673 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2674 (ASLR).
2675
2676 @kindex --dynamicbase
2677 @item --dynamicbase
2678 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2679 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2680 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2681
2682 @kindex --forceinteg
2683 @item --forceinteg
2684 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2685
2686 @kindex --nxcompat
2687 @item --nxcompat
2688 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2689 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2690
2691 @kindex --no-isolation
2692 @item --no-isolation
2693 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2694
2695 @kindex --no-seh
2696 @item --no-seh
2697 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2698 this image.
2699
2700 @kindex --no-bind
2701 @item --no-bind
2702 Do not bind this image.
2703
2704 @kindex --wdmdriver
2705 @item --wdmdriver
2706 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2707
2708 @kindex --tsaware
2709 @item --tsaware
2710 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2711
2712 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2713 @item --insert-timestamp
2714 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2715 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2716 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2717 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2718 will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2719 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2720 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2721 that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2722 identically.
2723 @end table
2724
2725 @c man end
2726
2727 @ifset C6X
2728 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2729
2730 @c man begin OPTIONS
2731
2732 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2733 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2734 all executables use an index of 0.
2735
2736 @table @gcctabopt
2737
2738 @kindex --dsbt-size
2739 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2740 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2741 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2742 entries.
2743
2744 @kindex --dsbt-index
2745 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2746 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2747 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2748 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2749 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2750
2751 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2752 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2753 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2754
2755 @end table
2756
2757 @c man end
2758 @end ifset
2759
2760 @ifset M68HC11
2761 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2762
2763 @c man begin OPTIONS
2764
2765 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2766 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2767
2768 @table @gcctabopt
2769
2770 @kindex --no-trampoline
2771 @item --no-trampoline
2772 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2773 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2774 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2775
2776 @kindex --bank-window
2777 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2778 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2779 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2780 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2781 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2782
2783 @end table
2784
2785 @c man end
2786 @end ifset
2787
2788 @ifset M68K
2789 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2790
2791 @c man begin OPTIONS
2792
2793 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2794 when linking for 68K targets.
2795
2796 @table @gcctabopt
2797
2798 @kindex --got
2799 @item --got=@var{type}
2800 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2801 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2802 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2803 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2804
2805 @end table
2806
2807 @c man end
2808 @end ifset
2809
2810 @ifset MIPS
2811 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2812
2813 @c man begin OPTIONS
2814
2815 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2816 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2817
2818 @table @gcctabopt
2819
2820 @kindex --insn32
2821 @item --insn32
2822 @kindex --no-insn32
2823 @itemx --no-insn32
2824 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2825 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2826 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2827 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2828 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2829 possible.
2830
2831 @end table
2832
2833 @c man end
2834 @end ifset
2835
2836 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2837 @node Environment
2838 @section Environment Variables
2839
2840 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2841
2842 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2843 @ifclear SingleFormat
2844 @code{GNUTARGET},
2845 @end ifclear
2846 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2847
2848 @ifclear SingleFormat
2849 @kindex GNUTARGET
2850 @cindex default input format
2851 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2852 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2853 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2854 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2855 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2856 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2857 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2858 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2859 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2860 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2861 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2862 @end ifclear
2863
2864 @kindex LDEMULATION
2865 @cindex default emulation
2866 @cindex emulation, default
2867 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2868 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2869 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2870 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2871 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2872 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2873 linker was configured.
2874
2875 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2876 @cindex demangling, default
2877 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2878 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2879 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2880 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2881 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2882 options.
2883
2884 @c man end
2885 @end ifset
2886
2887 @node Scripts
2888 @chapter Linker Scripts
2889
2890 @cindex scripts
2891 @cindex linker scripts
2892 @cindex command files
2893 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2894 written in the linker command language.
2895
2896 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2897 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2898 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2899 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2900 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2901 described below.
2902
2903 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2904 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2905 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2906 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2907 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2908
2909 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2910 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2911 default linker script.
2912
2913 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2914 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2915 Linker Scripts}.
2916
2917 @menu
2918 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2919 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2920 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2921 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2922 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2923 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2924 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2925 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2926 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2927 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2928 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2929 @end menu
2930
2931 @node Basic Script Concepts
2932 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2933 @cindex linker script concepts
2934 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2935 describe the linker script language.
2936
2937 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2938 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2939 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2940 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2941 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2942 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2943 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2944 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2945
2946 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2947 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2948 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
2949 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2950 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2951 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2952 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2953 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2954 of debugging information.
2955
2956 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2957 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2958 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2959 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2960 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2961 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2962 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2963 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2964 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2965 RAM address would be the VMA.
2966
2967 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2968 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2969
2970 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2971 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2972 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2973 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2974 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2975 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2976 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2977
2978 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2979 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2980 option.
2981
2982 @node Script Format
2983 @section Linker Script Format
2984 @cindex linker script format
2985 Linker scripts are text files.
2986
2987 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2988 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2989 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2990 generally ignored.
2991
2992 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2993 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2994 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2995 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2996 file name.
2997
2998 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2999 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3000 to whitespace.
3001
3002 @node Simple Example
3003 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3004 @cindex linker script example
3005 @cindex example of linker script
3006 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3007
3008 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3009 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3010 memory layout of the output file.
3011
3012 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3013 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3014 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3015 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3016 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3017 your input files.
3018
3019 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3020 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3021 linker script which will do that:
3022 @smallexample
3023 SECTIONS
3024 @{
3025 . = 0x10000;
3026 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3027 . = 0x8000000;
3028 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3029 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3030 @}
3031 @end smallexample
3032
3033 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3034 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3035 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3036
3037 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3038 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3039 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3040 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3041 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3042 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3043 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3044
3045 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3046 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3047 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3048 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3049 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3050 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3051
3052 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3053 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3054 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3055
3056 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3057 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3058 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3059 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3060 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3061 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3062 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3063
3064 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3065 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3066 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3067 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3068 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3069 sections.
3070
3071 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3072
3073 @node Simple Commands
3074 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3075 @cindex linker script simple commands
3076 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3077
3078 @menu
3079 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3080 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3081 @ifclear SingleFormat
3082 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3083 @end ifclear
3084
3085 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3086 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3087 @end menu
3088
3089 @node Entry Point
3090 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3091 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3092 @cindex start of execution
3093 @cindex first instruction
3094 @cindex entry point
3095 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3096 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3097 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3098 @smallexample
3099 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3100 @end smallexample
3101
3102 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3103 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3104 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3105 @itemize @bullet
3106 @item
3107 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3108 @item
3109 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3110 @item
3111 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3112 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3113 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3114 @item
3115 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3116 @item
3117 The address @code{0}.
3118 @end itemize
3119
3120 @node File Commands
3121 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3122 @cindex linker script file commands
3123 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3124
3125 @table @code
3126 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3127 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3128 @cindex including a linker script
3129 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3130 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3131 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3132 10 levels deep.
3133
3134 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3135 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3136
3137 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3138 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3139 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3140 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3141 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3142 @cindex linker script input object files
3143 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3144 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3145
3146 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3147 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3148 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3149
3150 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3151 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3152
3153 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3154 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3155 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3156 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3157 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3158 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3159 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3160 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3161 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3162
3163 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3164 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3165 @samp{-l}.
3166
3167 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3168 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3169 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3170
3171 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3172 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3173 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3174 @cindex grouping input files
3175 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3176 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3177 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3178 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3179
3180 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3181 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3182 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3183 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3184 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3185 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3186 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3187 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3188 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3189 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3190 setting afterwards.
3191
3192 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3193 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3194 @cindex output file name in linker script
3195 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3196 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3197 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3198 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3199 precedence.
3200
3201 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3202 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3203
3204 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3205 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3206 @cindex library search path in linker script
3207 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3208 @cindex search path in linker script
3209 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3210 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3211 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3212 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3213 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3214 the command line option are searched first.
3215
3216 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3217 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3218 @cindex first input file
3219 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3220 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3221 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3222 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3223 first file.
3224 @end table
3225
3226 @ifclear SingleFormat
3227 @node Format Commands
3228 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3229 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3230
3231 @table @code
3232 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3233 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3234 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3235 @cindex output file format in linker script
3236 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3237 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3238 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3239 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3240 line option takes precedence.
3241
3242 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3243 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3244 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3245 desired endianness.
3246
3247 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3248 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3249 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3250 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3251
3252 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3253 command:
3254 @smallexample
3255 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3256 @end smallexample
3257 This says that the default format for the output file is
3258 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3259 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3260 format.
3261
3262 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3263 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3264 @cindex input file format in linker script
3265 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3266 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3267 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3268 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3269 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3270 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3271 @end table
3272 @end ifclear
3273
3274 @node REGION_ALIAS
3275 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3276 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3277 @cindex region alias
3278 @cindex region names
3279
3280 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3281 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3282
3283 @smallexample
3284 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3285 @end smallexample
3286
3287 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3288 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3289 to memory regions. An example follows.
3290
3291 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3292 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3293 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3294 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3295 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3296 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3297 sections:
3298
3299 @itemize @bullet
3300 @item
3301 @code{.text} program code;
3302 @item
3303 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3304 @item
3305 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3306 @item
3307 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3308 @end itemize
3309
3310 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3311 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3312 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3313 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3314 @code{C}:
3315 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3316 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3317 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3318 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3319 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3320 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3321 @end multitable
3322 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3323 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3324 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3325 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3326
3327 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3328 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3329 memory layout:
3330 @smallexample
3331 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3332
3333 SECTIONS
3334 @{
3335 .text :
3336 @{
3337 *(.text)
3338 @} > REGION_TEXT
3339 .rodata :
3340 @{
3341 *(.rodata)
3342 rodata_end = .;
3343 @} > REGION_RODATA
3344 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3345 @{
3346 data_start = .;
3347 *(.data)
3348 @} > REGION_DATA
3349 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3350 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3351 .bss :
3352 @{
3353 *(.bss)
3354 @} > REGION_BSS
3355 @}
3356 @end smallexample
3357
3358 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3359 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3360 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3361 @table @code
3362 @item A
3363 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3364 @smallexample
3365 MEMORY
3366 @{
3367 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3368 @}
3369
3370 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3371 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3372 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3373 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3374 @end smallexample
3375 @item B
3376 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3377 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3378 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3379 @smallexample
3380 MEMORY
3381 @{
3382 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3383 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3384 @}
3385
3386 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3387 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3388 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3389 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3390 @end smallexample
3391 @item C
3392 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3393 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3394 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3395 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3396 @smallexample
3397 MEMORY
3398 @{
3399 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3400 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3401 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3402 @}
3403
3404 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3405 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3406 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3407 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3408 @end smallexample
3409 @end table
3410
3411 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3412 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3413 necessary:
3414 @smallexample
3415 #include <string.h>
3416
3417 extern char data_start [];
3418 extern char data_size [];
3419 extern char data_load_start [];
3420
3421 void copy_data(void)
3422 @{
3423 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3424 @{
3425 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3426 @}
3427 @}
3428 @end smallexample
3429
3430 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3431 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3432 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3433
3434 @table @code
3435 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3436 @kindex ASSERT
3437 @cindex assertion in linker script
3438 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3439 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3440
3441 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3442 @kindex EXTERN
3443 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3444 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3445 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3446 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3447 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3448 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3449
3450 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3451 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3452 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3453 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3454 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3455 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3456
3457 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3458 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3459 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3460 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3461 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3462 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3463
3464 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3465 @kindex INSERT
3466 @cindex insert user script into default script
3467 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3468 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3469 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3470 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3471 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3472 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3473 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3474 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3475 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3476 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3477 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3478 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3479 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3480
3481 @smallexample
3482 SECTIONS
3483 @{
3484 OVERLAY :
3485 @{
3486 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3487 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3488 @}
3489 @}
3490 INSERT AFTER .text;
3491 @end smallexample
3492
3493 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3494 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3495 @cindex cross references
3496 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3497 references among certain output sections.
3498
3499 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3500 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3501 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3502 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3503 a function defined in the other section.
3504
3505 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3506 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3507 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3508 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3509 names.
3510
3511 @ifclear SingleFormat
3512 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3513 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3514 @cindex machine architecture
3515 @cindex architecture
3516 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3517 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3518 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3519 the @samp{-f} option.
3520 @end ifclear
3521
3522 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3523 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3524 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3525 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3526 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3527 @xref{Expression Section}.
3528 @end table
3529
3530 @node Assignments
3531 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3532 @cindex assignment in scripts
3533 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3534 @cindex variables, defining
3535 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3536 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3537
3538 @menu
3539 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3540 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3541 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3542 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3543 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3544 @end menu
3545
3546 @node Simple Assignments
3547 @subsection Simple Assignments
3548
3549 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3550
3551 @table @code
3552 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3553 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3554 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3555 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3556 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3557 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3558 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3559 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3560 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3561 @end table
3562
3563 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3564 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3565 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3566
3567 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3568 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3569
3570 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3571
3572 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3573
3574 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3575 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3576 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3577
3578 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3579 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3580
3581 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3582 assignments may be used:
3583
3584 @smallexample
3585 floating_point = 0;
3586 SECTIONS
3587 @{
3588 .text :
3589 @{
3590 *(.text)
3591 _etext = .;
3592 @}
3593 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3594 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3595 @}
3596 @end smallexample
3597 @noindent
3598 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3599 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3600 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3601 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3602 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3603
3604 @node HIDDEN
3605 @subsection HIDDEN
3606 @cindex HIDDEN
3607 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3608 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3609
3610 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3611 @code{HIDDEN}:
3612
3613 @smallexample
3614 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3615 SECTIONS
3616 @{
3617 .text :
3618 @{
3619 *(.text)
3620 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3621 @}
3622 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3623 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3624 @}
3625 @end smallexample
3626 @noindent
3627 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3628
3629 @node PROVIDE
3630 @subsection PROVIDE
3631 @cindex PROVIDE
3632 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3633 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3634 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3635 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3636 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3637 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3638 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3639 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3640
3641 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3642 @smallexample
3643 SECTIONS
3644 @{
3645 .text :
3646 @{
3647 *(.text)
3648 _etext = .;
3649 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3650 @}
3651 @}
3652 @end smallexample
3653
3654 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3655 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3656 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3657 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3658 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3659 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3660
3661 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3662 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3663 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3664 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3665 hidden and won't be exported.
3666
3667 @node Source Code Reference
3668 @subsection Source Code Reference
3669
3670 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3671 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3672 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3673 symbol that does not have a value.
3674
3675 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3676 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3677 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3678 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3679 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3680 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3681 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3682 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3683
3684 @smallexample
3685 extern int foo;
3686 @end smallexample
3687
3688 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3689
3690 @smallexample
3691 _foo = 1000;
3692 @end smallexample
3693
3694 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3695 transformation has taken place.
3696
3697 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3698 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3699 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3700 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3701 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3702 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3703 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3704
3705 @smallexample
3706 int foo = 1000;
3707 @end smallexample
3708
3709 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3710 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3711 number 1000 is initially stored.
3712
3713 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3714 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3715 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3716 So:
3717
3718 @smallexample
3719 foo = 1;
3720 @end smallexample
3721
3722 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3723 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3724 address. Whereas:
3725
3726 @smallexample
3727 int * a = & foo;
3728 @end smallexample
3729
3730 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3731 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3732 the variable @samp{a}.
3733
3734 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3735 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3736 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3737
3738 @smallexample
3739 foo = 1000;
3740 @end smallexample
3741
3742 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3743 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3744 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3745 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3746 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3747
3748 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3749 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3750 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3751 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3752 linker script contains these declarations:
3753
3754 @smallexample
3755 @group
3756 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3757 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3758 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3759 @end group
3760 @end smallexample
3761
3762 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3763
3764 @smallexample
3765 @group
3766 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3767
3768 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3769 @end group
3770 @end smallexample
3771
3772 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3773
3774 @node SECTIONS
3775 @section SECTIONS Command
3776 @kindex SECTIONS
3777 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3778 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3779
3780 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3781 @smallexample
3782 SECTIONS
3783 @{
3784 @var{sections-command}
3785 @var{sections-command}
3786 @dots{}
3787 @}
3788 @end smallexample
3789
3790 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3791
3792 @itemize @bullet
3793 @item
3794 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3795 @item
3796 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3797 @item
3798 an output section description
3799 @item
3800 an overlay description
3801 @end itemize
3802
3803 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3804 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3805 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3806 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3807 the layout of the output file.
3808
3809 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3810 below.
3811
3812 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3813 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3814 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3815 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3816 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3817 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3818
3819 @menu
3820 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3821 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3822 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3823 * Input Section:: Input section description
3824 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3825 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3826 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3827 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3828 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3829 @end menu
3830
3831 @node Output Section Description
3832 @subsection Output Section Description
3833 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3834 @smallexample
3835 @group
3836 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3837 [AT(@var{lma})]
3838 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3839 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3840 [@var{constraint}]
3841 @{
3842 @var{output-section-command}
3843 @var{output-section-command}
3844 @dots{}
3845 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
3846 @end group
3847 @end smallexample
3848
3849 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3850
3851 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3852 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3853 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3854 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
3855 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3856
3857 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3858
3859 @itemize @bullet
3860 @item
3861 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3862 @item
3863 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3864 @item
3865 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3866 @item
3867 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3868 @end itemize
3869
3870 @node Output Section Name
3871 @subsection Output Section Name
3872 @cindex name, section
3873 @cindex section name
3874 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3875 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3876 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3877 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3878 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3879 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3880 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3881 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3882 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3883 commas must be quoted.
3884
3885 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3886 Discarding}.
3887
3888 @node Output Section Address
3889 @subsection Output Section Address
3890 @cindex address, section
3891 @cindex section address
3892 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3893 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3894 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3895
3896 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3897 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3898 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3899 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3900 contained within the output section.
3901
3902 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3903
3904 @itemize @bullet
3905 @item
3906 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3907 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3908 in that region.
3909
3910 @item
3911 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3912 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3913 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3914 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3915
3916 @item
3917 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3918 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3919 counter.
3920 @end itemize
3921
3922 @noindent
3923 For example:
3924
3925 @smallexample
3926 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3927 @end smallexample
3928
3929 @noindent
3930 and
3931
3932 @smallexample
3933 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3934 @end smallexample
3935
3936 @noindent
3937 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3938 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3939 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3940 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3941 input sections.
3942
3943 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3944 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3945 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3946 do something like this:
3947 @smallexample
3948 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3949 @end smallexample
3950 @noindent
3951 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3952 aligned upward to the specified value.
3953
3954 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3955 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3956 sections are ignored).
3957
3958 @node Input Section
3959 @subsection Input Section Description
3960 @cindex input sections
3961 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3962 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3963
3964 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3965 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3966 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3967 map the input files into your memory layout.
3968
3969 @menu
3970 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3971 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3972 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3973 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3974 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3975 @end menu
3976
3977 @node Input Section Basics
3978 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3979 @cindex input section basics
3980 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3981 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3982
3983 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3984 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3985
3986 The most common input section description is to include all input
3987 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3988 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3989 @smallexample
3990 *(.text)
3991 @end smallexample
3992 @noindent
3993 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3994 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3995 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3996 example:
3997 @smallexample
3998 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3999 @end smallexample
4000 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4001 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4002
4003 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4004 @smallexample
4005 *(.text .rdata)
4006 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4007 @end smallexample
4008 @noindent
4009 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4010 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4011 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4012 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4013 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4014 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4015
4016 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4017 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4018 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4019 @smallexample
4020 data.o(.data)
4021 @end smallexample
4022
4023 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4024 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4025
4026 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4027
4028 @smallexample
4029 @group
4030 SECTIONS @{
4031 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4032 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4033 @}
4034 @end group
4035 @end smallexample
4036
4037 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4038 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4039 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4040 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4041 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4042
4043 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4044 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4045 with no whitespace around the colon.
4046
4047 @table @samp
4048 @item archive:file
4049 matches file within archive
4050 @item archive:
4051 matches the whole archive
4052 @item :file
4053 matches file but not one in an archive
4054 @end table
4055
4056 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4057 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4058 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4059 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4060 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4061 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4062 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4063 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4064 command.
4065
4066 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4067 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4068 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4069 @smallexample
4070 data.o
4071 @end smallexample
4072
4073 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4074 and does not contain any wild card
4075 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4076 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4077 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4078 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4079 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4080 the archive search path.
4081
4082 @node Input Section Wildcards
4083 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4084 @cindex input section wildcards
4085 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4086 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4087 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4088 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4089 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4090
4091 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4092 pattern for the file name.
4093
4094 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4095
4096 @table @samp
4097 @item *
4098 matches any number of characters
4099 @item ?
4100 matches any single character
4101 @item [@var{chars}]
4102 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4103 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4104 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4105 @item \
4106 quotes the following character
4107 @end table
4108
4109 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4110 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4111 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4112 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4113 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4114 a @samp{/} character.
4115
4116 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4117 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4118 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4119
4120 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4121 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4122 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4123 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4124 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4125 @smallexample
4126 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4127 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4128 @end smallexample
4129
4130 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4131 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4132 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4133 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4134 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4135 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4136 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4137
4138 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4139 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4140 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4141 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4142 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4143 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4144
4145 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4146 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4147 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4148 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4149 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4150
4151 @cindex SORT
4152 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4153
4154 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4155 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4156
4157 @enumerate
4158 @item
4159 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4160 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4161 sections have the same name.
4162 @item
4163 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4164 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4165 sections have the same alignment.
4166 @item
4167 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4168 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4169 @item
4170 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4171 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4172 @item
4173 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4174 @end enumerate
4175
4176 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4177 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4178 takes precedence over the command line option.
4179
4180 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4181 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4182 treated as nested sorting command.
4183
4184 @enumerate
4185 @item
4186 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4187 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4188 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4189 @item
4190 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4191 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4192 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4193 @end enumerate
4194
4195 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4196 command line option will be ignored.
4197
4198 @cindex SORT_NONE
4199 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4200 section sorting option.
4201
4202 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4203 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4204 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4205
4206 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4207 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4208 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4209 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4210 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4211 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4212 @smallexample
4213 @group
4214 SECTIONS @{
4215 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4216 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4217 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4218 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4219 @}
4220 @end group
4221 @end smallexample
4222
4223 @node Input Section Common
4224 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4225 @cindex common symbol placement
4226 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4227 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4228 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4229 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4230 named @samp{COMMON}.
4231
4232 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4233 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4234 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4235 input files are placed in another section.
4236
4237 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4238 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4239 @smallexample
4240 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4241 @end smallexample
4242
4243 @cindex scommon section
4244 @cindex small common symbols
4245 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4246 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4247 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4248 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4249 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4250 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4251 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4252 locations.
4253
4254 @cindex [COMMON]
4255 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4256 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4257 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4258
4259 @node Input Section Keep
4260 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4261 @cindex KEEP
4262 @cindex garbage collection
4263 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4264 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4265 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4266 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4267 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4268
4269 @node Input Section Example
4270 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4271 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4272 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4273 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4274 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4275 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4276 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4277 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4278 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4279 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4280
4281 @smallexample
4282 @group
4283 SECTIONS @{
4284 outputa 0x10000 :
4285 @{
4286 all.o
4287 foo.o (.input1)
4288 @}
4289 @end group
4290 @group
4291 outputb :
4292 @{
4293 foo.o (.input2)
4294 foo1.o (.input1)
4295 @}
4296 @end group
4297 @group
4298 outputc :
4299 @{
4300 *(.input1)
4301 *(.input2)
4302 @}
4303 @}
4304 @end group
4305 @end smallexample
4306
4307 @node Output Section Data
4308 @subsection Output Section Data
4309 @cindex data
4310 @cindex section data
4311 @cindex output section data
4312 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4313 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4314 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4315 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4316 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4317 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4318 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4319 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4320 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4321 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4322 counter.
4323
4324 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4325 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4326 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4327 stored.
4328
4329 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4330 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4331 @smallexample
4332 BYTE(1)
4333 LONG(addr)
4334 @end smallexample
4335
4336 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4337 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4338 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4339 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4340 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4341
4342 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4343 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4344 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4345 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4346 endianness of the first input object file.
4347
4348 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4349 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4350 @smallexample
4351 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4352 @end smallexample
4353 whereas this will work:
4354 @smallexample
4355 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4356 @end smallexample
4357
4358 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4359 @cindex holes, filling
4360 @cindex unspecified memory
4361 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4362 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4363 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4364 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4365 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4366 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4367 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4368 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4369 different parts of an output section.
4370
4371 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4372 value @samp{0x90}:
4373 @smallexample
4374 FILL(0x90909090)
4375 @end smallexample
4376
4377 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4378 section attribute, but it only affects the
4379 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4380 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4381 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4382 expression.
4383
4384 @node Output Section Keywords
4385 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4386 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4387 commands.
4388
4389 @table @code
4390 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4391 @cindex input filename symbols
4392 @cindex filename symbols
4393 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4394 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4395 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4396 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4397 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4398
4399 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4400 normally used for any other object file format.
4401
4402 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4403 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4404 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4405 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4406 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4407 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4408 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4409 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4410 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4411 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4412 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4413 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4414 ignored for other object file formats.
4415
4416 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4417 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4418 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4419 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4420 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4421 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4422 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4423 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4424 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4425 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4426 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4427 @code{exit}.
4428
4429 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4430 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4431 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4432 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4433 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4434 runtime code expects to see.
4435
4436 @smallexample
4437 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4438 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4439 *(.ctors)
4440 LONG(0)
4441 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4442 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4443 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4444 *(.dtors)
4445 LONG(0)
4446 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4447 @end smallexample
4448
4449 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4450 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4451 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4452 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4453 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4454 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4455 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4456 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4457
4458 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4459 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4460 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4461 scripts.
4462
4463 @end table
4464
4465 @node Output Section Discarding
4466 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4467 @cindex discarding sections
4468 @cindex sections, discarding
4469 @cindex removing sections
4470 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4471 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4472 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4473 @smallexample
4474 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4475 @end smallexample
4476 @noindent
4477 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4478 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4479 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4480 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4481 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4482 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4483 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4484 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4485 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4486
4487 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4488 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4489 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4490 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4491 section is discarded.
4492
4493 @cindex /DISCARD/
4494 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4495 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4496 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4497
4498 @node Output Section Attributes
4499 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4500 @cindex output section attributes
4501 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4502 like this:
4503
4504 @smallexample
4505 @group
4506 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4507 [AT(@var{lma})]
4508 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4509 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4510 [@var{constraint}]
4511 @{
4512 @var{output-section-command}
4513 @var{output-section-command}
4514 @dots{}
4515 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4516 @end group
4517 @end smallexample
4518
4519 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4520 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4521 remaining section attributes.
4522
4523 @menu
4524 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4525 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4526 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4527 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4528 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4529 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4530 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4531 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4532 @end menu
4533
4534 @node Output Section Type
4535 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4536 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4537 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4538
4539 @table @code
4540 @item NOLOAD
4541 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4542 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4543 @item DSECT
4544 @itemx COPY
4545 @itemx INFO
4546 @itemx OVERLAY
4547 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4548 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4549 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4550 section when the program is run.
4551 @end table
4552
4553 @kindex NOLOAD
4554 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4555 @cindex loading, preventing
4556 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4557 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4558 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4559 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4560 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4561 @smallexample
4562 @group
4563 SECTIONS @{
4564 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4565 @dots{}
4566 @}
4567 @end group
4568 @end smallexample
4569
4570 @node Output Section LMA
4571 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4572 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4573 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4574 @cindex load address
4575 @cindex section load address
4576 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4577 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4578 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4579 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4580 address is optional.
4581
4582 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4583 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4584 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4585 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4586 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4587
4588 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4589 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4590 load address:
4591
4592 @itemize @bullet
4593 @item
4594 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4595 the LMA address as well.
4596
4597 @item
4598 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4599
4600 @item
4601 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4602 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4603 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4604 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4605 the last section in the located region.
4606
4607 @item
4608 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4609 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4610
4611 @item
4612 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4613 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4614 @end itemize
4615
4616 @cindex ROM initialized data
4617 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4618 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4619 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4620 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4621 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4622 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4623 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4624 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4625 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4626
4627 @smallexample
4628 @group
4629 SECTIONS
4630 @{
4631 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4632 .mdata 0x2000 :
4633 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4634 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4635 .bss 0x3000 :
4636 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4637 @}
4638 @end group
4639 @end smallexample
4640
4641 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4642 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4643 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4644 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4645 script.
4646
4647 @smallexample
4648 @group
4649 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4650 char *src = &_etext;
4651 char *dst = &_data;
4652
4653 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4654 while (dst < &_edata)
4655 *dst++ = *src++;
4656
4657 /* Zero bss. */
4658 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4659 *dst = 0;
4660 @end group
4661 @end smallexample
4662
4663 @node Forced Output Alignment
4664 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4665 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4666 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4667 @cindex output section alignment
4668 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4669 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4670 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4671
4672 @node Forced Input Alignment
4673 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4674 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4675 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4676 @cindex input section alignment
4677 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4678 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4679 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4680
4681 @node Output Section Constraint
4682 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4683 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4684 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4685 @cindex constraints on output sections
4686 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4687 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4688 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4689 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4690
4691 @node Output Section Region
4692 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4693 @kindex >@var{region}
4694 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4695 @cindex memory regions and sections
4696 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4697 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4698
4699 Here is a simple example:
4700 @smallexample
4701 @group
4702 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4703 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4704 @end group
4705 @end smallexample
4706
4707 @node Output Section Phdr
4708 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4709 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4710 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4711 @cindex program headers and sections
4712 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4713 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4714 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4715 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4716 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4717 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4718
4719 Here is a simple example:
4720 @smallexample
4721 @group
4722 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4723 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4724 @end group
4725 @end smallexample
4726
4727 @node Output Section Fill
4728 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4729 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4730 @cindex section fill pattern
4731 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4732 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4733 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4734 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4735 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4736 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4737 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4738 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4739 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4740 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4741 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4742 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4743 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4744
4745 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4746 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4747
4748 Here is a simple example:
4749 @smallexample
4750 @group
4751 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4752 @end group
4753 @end smallexample
4754
4755 @node Overlay Description
4756 @subsection Overlay Description
4757 @kindex OVERLAY
4758 @cindex overlays
4759 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4760 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4761 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4762 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4763 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4764 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4765 than another.
4766
4767 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4768 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4769 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4770 command is as follows:
4771 @smallexample
4772 @group
4773 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4774 @{
4775 @var{secname1}
4776 @{
4777 @var{output-section-command}
4778 @var{output-section-command}
4779 @dots{}
4780 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4781 @var{secname2}
4782 @{
4783 @var{output-section-command}
4784 @var{output-section-command}
4785 @dots{}
4786 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4787 @dots{}
4788 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4789 @end group
4790 @end smallexample
4791
4792 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4793 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4794 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4795 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4796 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4797 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4798
4799 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4800 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4801
4802 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4803 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4804 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4805 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4806 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4807 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4808
4809 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4810 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4811 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4812 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4813 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4814
4815 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4816 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4817 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4818 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4819 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4820 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4821 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4822
4823 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4824 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4825
4826 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4827 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4828 @smallexample
4829 @group
4830 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4831 @{
4832 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4833 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4834 @}
4835 @end group
4836 @end smallexample
4837 @noindent
4838 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4839 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4840 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4841 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4842 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4843 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4844
4845 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4846 like the following.
4847
4848 @smallexample
4849 @group
4850 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4851 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4852 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4853 @end group
4854 @end smallexample
4855
4856 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4857 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4858 example could have been written identically as follows.
4859
4860 @smallexample
4861 @group
4862 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4863 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4864 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4865 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4866 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4867 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4868 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4869 @end group
4870 @end smallexample
4871
4872 @node MEMORY
4873 @section MEMORY Command
4874 @kindex MEMORY
4875 @cindex memory regions
4876 @cindex regions of memory
4877 @cindex allocating memory
4878 @cindex discontinuous memory
4879 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4880 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4881
4882 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4883 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4884 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4885 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4886 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4887 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4888 around to fit into the available regions.
4889
4890 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4891 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4892 you wish. The syntax is:
4893 @smallexample
4894 @group
4895 MEMORY
4896 @{
4897 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4898 @dots{}
4899 @}
4900 @end group
4901 @end smallexample
4902
4903 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4904 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4905 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4906 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4907 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4908 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4909 command.
4910
4911 @cindex memory region attributes
4912 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4913 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4914 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4915 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4916 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4917 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4918 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4919
4920 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4921 @table @samp
4922 @item R
4923 Read-only section
4924 @item W
4925 Read/write section
4926 @item X
4927 Executable section
4928 @item A
4929 Allocatable section
4930 @item I
4931 Initialized section
4932 @item L
4933 Same as @samp{I}
4934 @item !
4935 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4936 @end table
4937
4938 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4939 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4940 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4941 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4942 attributes.
4943
4944 @kindex ORIGIN =
4945 @kindex o =
4946 @kindex org =
4947 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4948 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4949 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4950 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4951 @code{ORG}).
4952
4953 @kindex LENGTH =
4954 @kindex len =
4955 @kindex l =
4956 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4957 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4958 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4959 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4960
4961 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4962 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4963 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4964 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4965 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4966 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4967 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4968 region.
4969
4970 @smallexample
4971 @group
4972 MEMORY
4973 @{
4974 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4975 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4976 @}
4977 @end group
4978 @end smallexample
4979
4980 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4981 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4982 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4983 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4984 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4985 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4986 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4987 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4988 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4989
4990 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4991 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4992 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4993
4994 @smallexample
4995 @group
4996 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4997 @end group
4998 @end smallexample
4999
5000 @node PHDRS
5001 @section PHDRS Command
5002 @kindex PHDRS
5003 @cindex program headers
5004 @cindex ELF program headers
5005 @cindex program segments
5006 @cindex segments, ELF
5007 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5008 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5009 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5010 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5011
5012 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5013 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5014 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5015 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5016 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5017
5018 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5019 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5020 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5021 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5022 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5023
5024 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5025 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5026 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5027
5028 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5029 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5030
5031 @smallexample
5032 @group
5033 PHDRS
5034 @{
5035 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5036 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5037 @}
5038 @end group
5039 @end smallexample
5040
5041 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5042 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5043 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5044 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5045 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5046 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5047
5048 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5049 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5050 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5051 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5052 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5053 Section Phdr}.
5054
5055 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5056 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5057 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5058 contain the section.
5059
5060 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5061 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5062 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5063 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5064 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5065 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5066 segment at all.
5067
5068 @kindex FILEHDR
5069 @kindex PHDRS
5070 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5071 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5072 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5073 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5074 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5075 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5076 these keywords.
5077
5078 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5079 value of the keyword.
5080
5081 @table @asis
5082 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5083 Indicates an unused program header.
5084
5085 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5086 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5087 the file.
5088
5089 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5090 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5091
5092 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5093 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5094 found.
5095
5096 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5097 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5098
5099 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5100 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5101 ABI.
5102
5103 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5104 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5105
5106 @item @var{expression}
5107 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5108 be used for types not defined above.
5109 @end table
5110
5111 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5112 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5113 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5114 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5115 output section attribute.
5116
5117 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5118 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5119 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5120 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5121 header.
5122
5123 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5124 headers used on a native ELF system.
5125
5126 @example
5127 @group
5128 PHDRS
5129 @{
5130 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5131 interp PT_INTERP ;
5132 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5133 data PT_LOAD ;
5134 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5135 @}
5136
5137 SECTIONS
5138 @{
5139 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5140 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5141 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5142 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5143 @dots{}
5144 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5145 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5146 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5147 @dots{}
5148 @}
5149 @end group
5150 @end example
5151
5152 @node VERSION
5153 @section VERSION Command
5154 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5155 @cindex symbol versions
5156 @cindex version script
5157 @cindex versions of symbols
5158 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5159 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5160 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5161 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5162 shared library.
5163
5164 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5165 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5166 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5167
5168 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5169 @smallexample
5170 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5171 @end smallexample
5172
5173 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5174 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5175 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5176 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5177 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5178 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5179 library.
5180
5181 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5182 examples.
5183
5184 @smallexample
5185 VERS_1.1 @{
5186 global:
5187 foo1;
5188 local:
5189 old*;
5190 original*;
5191 new*;
5192 @};
5193
5194 VERS_1.2 @{
5195 foo2;
5196 @} VERS_1.1;
5197
5198 VERS_2.0 @{
5199 bar1; bar2;
5200 extern "C++" @{
5201 ns::*;
5202 "f(int, double)";
5203 @};
5204 @} VERS_1.2;
5205 @end smallexample
5206
5207 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5208 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5209 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5210 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5211 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5212 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5213 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5214 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5215 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5216 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5217
5218 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5219 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5220 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5221
5222 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5223 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5224 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5225
5226 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5227 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5228 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5229 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5230 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5231 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5232 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5233 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5234 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5235
5236 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5237 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5238 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5239 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5240
5241 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5242 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5243 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5244 won't.
5245
5246 @smallexample
5247 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5248 @end smallexample
5249
5250 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5251 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5252 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5253 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5254 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5255 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5256 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5257 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5258 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5259 search for each symbol reference.
5260
5261 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5262 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5263 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5264 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5265 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5266 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5267 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5268 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5269 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5270
5271 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5272 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5273 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5274 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5275 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5276 @smallexample
5277 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5278 @end smallexample
5279 @noindent
5280 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5281 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5282 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5283 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5284 takes precedence over a version script.
5285
5286 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5287 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5288 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5289 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5290 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5291
5292 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5293 source file. Here is an example:
5294
5295 @smallexample
5296 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5297 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5298 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5299 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5300 @end smallexample
5301
5302 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5303 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5304 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5305 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5306
5307 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5308 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5309 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5310 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5311 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5312 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5313
5314 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5315 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5316 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5317 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5318
5319 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5320
5321 @smallexample
5322 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5323 @end smallexample
5324
5325 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5326 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5327 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5328 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5329 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5330
5331 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5332 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5333 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5334 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5335 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5336 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5337 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5338 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5339 expect when you upgrade.
5340
5341 @node Expressions
5342 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5343 @cindex expressions
5344 @cindex arithmetic
5345 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5346 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5347 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5348 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5349
5350 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5351
5352 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5353 expressions.
5354
5355 @menu
5356 * Constants:: Constants
5357 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5358 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5359 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5360 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5361 * Operators:: Operators
5362 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5363 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5364 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5365 @end menu
5366
5367 @node Constants
5368 @subsection Constants
5369 @cindex integer notation
5370 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5371 All constants are integers.
5372
5373 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5374 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5375 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5376 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5377 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5378 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5379
5380 @cindex scaled integers
5381 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5382 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5383 @cindex suffixes for integers
5384 @cindex integer suffixes
5385 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5386 constant by
5387 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5388 @ifnottex
5389 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5390 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5391 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5392 @end ifnottex
5393 @tex
5394 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5395 @end tex
5396 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5397 respectively. For example, the following
5398 all refer to the same quantity:
5399
5400 @smallexample
5401 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5402 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5403 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5404 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5405 @end smallexample
5406
5407 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5408 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5409
5410 @node Symbolic Constants
5411 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5412 @cindex symbolic constants
5413 @kindex CONSTANT
5414 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5415 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5416
5417 @table @code
5418 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5419 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5420 The target's maximum page size.
5421
5422 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5423 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5424 The target's default page size.
5425 @end table
5426
5427 So for example:
5428
5429 @smallexample
5430 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5431 @end smallexample
5432
5433 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5434 supported by the target.
5435
5436 @node Symbols
5437 @subsection Symbol Names
5438 @cindex symbol names
5439 @cindex names
5440 @cindex quoted symbol names
5441 @kindex "
5442 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5443 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5444 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5445 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5446 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5447 @smallexample
5448 "SECTION" = 9;
5449 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5450 @end smallexample
5451
5452 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5453 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5454 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5455
5456 @node Orphan Sections
5457 @subsection Orphan Sections
5458 @cindex orphan
5459 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5460 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5461 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5462 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5463 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5464 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5465 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5466 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5467 at the end of the file.
5468
5469 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5470 well as section flag.
5471
5472 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5473 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5474 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5475 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5476 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5477 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5478 character.
5479
5480 @node Location Counter
5481 @subsection The Location Counter
5482 @kindex .
5483 @cindex dot
5484 @cindex location counter
5485 @cindex current output location
5486 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5487 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5488 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5489 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5490 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5491
5492 @cindex holes
5493 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5494 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5495 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5496 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5497 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5498
5499 @smallexample
5500 SECTIONS
5501 @{
5502 output :
5503 @{
5504 file1(.text)
5505 . = . + 1000;
5506 file2(.text)
5507 . += 1000;
5508 file3(.text)
5509 @} = 0x12345678;
5510 @}
5511 @end smallexample
5512 @noindent
5513 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5514 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5515 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5516 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5517 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5518 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5519
5520 @cindex dot inside sections
5521 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5522 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5523 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5524 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5525 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5526 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5527
5528 @smallexample
5529 SECTIONS
5530 @{
5531 . = 0x100
5532 .text: @{
5533 *(.text)
5534 . = 0x200
5535 @}
5536 . = 0x500
5537 .data: @{
5538 *(.data)
5539 . += 0x600
5540 @}
5541 @}
5542 @end smallexample
5543
5544 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5545 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5546 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5547 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5548 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5549 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5550 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5551 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5552
5553 @cindex dot outside sections
5554 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5555 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5556 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5557
5558 @smallexample
5559 SECTIONS
5560 @{
5561 start_of_text = . ;
5562 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5563 end_of_text = . ;
5564
5565 start_of_data = . ;
5566 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5567 end_of_data = . ;
5568 @}
5569 @end smallexample
5570
5571 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5572 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5573 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5574 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5575 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5576 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5577 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5578 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5579 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5580 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5581 as follows:
5582
5583 @smallexample
5584 SECTIONS
5585 @{
5586 start_of_text = . ;
5587 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5588 end_of_text = . ;
5589
5590 start_of_data = . ;
5591 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5592 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5593 end_of_data = . ;
5594 @}
5595 @end smallexample
5596
5597 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5598 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5599 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5600 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5601 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5602 section. So you could write:
5603
5604 @smallexample
5605 SECTIONS
5606 @{
5607 start_of_text = . ;
5608 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5609 end_of_text = . ;
5610
5611 . = . ;
5612 start_of_data = . ;
5613 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5614 end_of_data = . ;
5615 @}
5616 @end smallexample
5617
5618 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5619 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5620
5621 @need 2000
5622 @node Operators
5623 @subsection Operators
5624 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5625 @cindex arithmetic operators
5626 @cindex precedence in expressions
5627 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5628 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5629 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5630 @ifnottex
5631 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5632 @smallexample
5633 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5634 (highest)
5635 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5636 2 left * / %
5637 3 left + -
5638 4 left >> <<
5639 5 left == != > < <= >=
5640 6 left &
5641 7 left |
5642 8 left &&
5643 9 left ||
5644 10 right ? :
5645 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5646 (lowest)
5647 @end smallexample
5648 Notes:
5649 (1) Prefix operators
5650 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5651 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5652 @end ifnottex
5653 @tex
5654 \vskip \baselineskip
5655 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5656 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5657 \hrule
5658 \halign
5659 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5660 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5661 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5662 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5663 \noalign{\hrule}
5664 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5665 &highest&&&&&\cr
5666 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5667 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5668 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5669 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5670 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5671 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5672 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5673 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5674 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5675 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5676 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5677 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5678 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5679 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5680 \hrule}
5681 @end tex
5682 @iftex
5683 {
5684 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5685 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5686 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5687 }
5688 @end iftex
5689 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5690
5691 @node Evaluation
5692 @subsection Evaluation
5693 @cindex lazy evaluation
5694 @cindex expression evaluation order
5695 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5696 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5697
5698 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5699 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5700 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5701 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5702
5703 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5704 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5705 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5706 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5707
5708 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5709 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5710 allocation.
5711
5712 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5713 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5714
5715 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5716 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5717 following
5718 @smallexample
5719 @group
5720 SECTIONS
5721 @{
5722 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5723 @{ *(.text) @}
5724 @}
5725 @end group
5726 @end smallexample
5727 @noindent
5728 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5729 address}.
5730
5731 @node Expression Section
5732 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5733 @cindex expression sections
5734 @cindex absolute expressions
5735 @cindex relative expressions
5736 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5737 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5738 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5739 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5740 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5741 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5742 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5743 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5744 operations.
5745
5746 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5747 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5748 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5749 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5750 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5751 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5752 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5753 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5754 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5755 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5756 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5757 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5758 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5759 everywhere.
5760
5761 In the following simple example,
5762
5763 @smallexample
5764 @group
5765 SECTIONS
5766 @{
5767 . = 0x100;
5768 __executable_start = 0x100;
5769 .data :
5770 @{
5771 . = 0x10;
5772 __data_start = 0x10;
5773 *(.data)
5774 @}
5775 @dots{}
5776 @}
5777 @end group
5778 @end smallexample
5779
5780 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5781 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5782 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5783 section in the second two assignments.
5784
5785 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5786 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5787
5788 @itemize @bullet
5789 @item
5790 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5791 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5792 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5793 @item
5794 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5795 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5796 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5797 @item
5798 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5799 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5800 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5801 before applying the operator.
5802 @end itemize
5803
5804 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5805
5806 @itemize @bullet
5807 @item
5808 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5809 @item
5810 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5811 @item
5812 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5813 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5814 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5815 @item
5816 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5817 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5818 section as the relative operand(s).
5819 @item
5820 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5821 conversions) is an absolute address.
5822 @end itemize
5823
5824 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5825 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5826 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5827 section @samp{.data}:
5828 @smallexample
5829 SECTIONS
5830 @{
5831 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5832 @}
5833 @end smallexample
5834 @noindent
5835 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5836 @samp{.data} section.
5837
5838 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5839 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5840
5841 @node Builtin Functions
5842 @subsection Builtin Functions
5843 @cindex functions in expressions
5844 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5845 use in linker script expressions.
5846
5847 @table @code
5848 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5849 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5850 @cindex expression, absolute
5851 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5852 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5853 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5854 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5855
5856 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5857 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5858 @cindex section address in expression
5859 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5860 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5861 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5862 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5863 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5864 the other two will be absolute:
5865 @smallexample
5866 @group
5867 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5868 .output1 :
5869 @{
5870 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5871 @dots{}
5872 @}
5873 .output :
5874 @{
5875 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5876 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5877 @}
5878 @dots{} @}
5879 @end group
5880 @end smallexample
5881
5882 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5883 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5884 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5885 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5886 @cindex round up location counter
5887 @cindex align location counter
5888 @cindex round up expression
5889 @cindex align expression
5890 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5891 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5892 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5893 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5894 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5895 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5896
5897 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5898 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5899 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5900 input sections:
5901 @smallexample
5902 @group
5903 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5904 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5905 *(.data)
5906 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5907 @}
5908 @dots{} @}
5909 @end group
5910 @end smallexample
5911 @noindent
5912 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5913 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5914 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5915 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5916
5917 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5918
5919 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5920 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5921 @cindex section alignment
5922 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5923 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5924 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5925 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5926 value in that section.
5927 @smallexample
5928 @group
5929 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5930 .output @{
5931 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5932 @dots{}
5933 @}
5934 @dots{} @}
5935 @end group
5936 @end smallexample
5937
5938 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5939 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5940 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5941 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5942 section.
5943
5944 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5945 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5946 This is equivalent to either
5947 @smallexample
5948 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5949 @end smallexample
5950 or
5951 @smallexample
5952 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5953 @end smallexample
5954 @noindent
5955 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5956 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5957 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5958 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5959 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5960 bytes in the on-disk file.
5961
5962 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5963 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5964 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5965 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5966 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5967
5968 @noindent
5969 Example:
5970 @smallexample
5971 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5972 @end smallexample
5973
5974 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5975 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5976 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5977 evaluation purposes.
5978
5979 @smallexample
5980 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5981 @end smallexample
5982
5983 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5984 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5985 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5986 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
5987 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5988 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5989 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5990 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5991 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5992 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5993 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5994 section alignment.
5995
5996 @smallexample
5997 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5998 @end smallexample
5999
6000 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6001 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6002 @cindex symbol defaults
6003 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6004 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6005 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6006 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6007 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6008 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6009 existed, its value is preserved:
6010
6011 @smallexample
6012 @group
6013 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6014 .text : @{
6015 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6016 @dots{}
6017 @}
6018 @dots{}
6019 @}
6020 @end group
6021 @end smallexample
6022
6023 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6024 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6025 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6026
6027 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6028 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6029 @cindex section load address in expression
6030 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6031 Section LMA}).
6032
6033 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6034 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6035 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6036 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6037
6038 @kindex MAX
6039 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6040 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6041
6042 @kindex MIN
6043 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6044 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6045
6046 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6047 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6048 @cindex unallocated address, next
6049 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6050 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6051 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6052 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6053
6054 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6055 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6056 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6057
6058 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6059 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6060 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6061 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6062 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6063 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6064 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6065 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6066 name.
6067
6068 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6069 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6070 @cindex section size
6071 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6072 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6073 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6074 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6075 @smallexample
6076 @group
6077 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6078 .output @{
6079 .start = . ;
6080 @dots{}
6081 .end = . ;
6082 @}
6083 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6084 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6085 @dots{} @}
6086 @end group
6087 @end smallexample
6088
6089 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6090 @itemx sizeof_headers
6091 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6092 @cindex header size
6093 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6094 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6095 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6096 choose, to facilitate paging.
6097
6098 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6099 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6100 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6101 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6102 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6103 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6104 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6105 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6106 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6107 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6108 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6109 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6110 @end table
6111
6112 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6113 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6114 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6115 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6116 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6117 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6118 linker will report an error.
6119
6120 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6121
6122 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6123 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6124 commands.
6125
6126 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6127 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6128 read. This can affect archive searching.
6129
6130 @ifset GENERIC
6131 @node Machine Dependent
6132 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6133
6134 @cindex machine dependencies
6135 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6136 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6137 functionality are not listed.
6138
6139 @menu
6140 @ifset H8300
6141 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6142 @end ifset
6143 @ifset I960
6144 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6145 @end ifset
6146 @ifset M68HC11
6147 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6148 @end ifset
6149 @ifset ARM
6150 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6151 @end ifset
6152 @ifset HPPA
6153 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6154 @end ifset
6155 @ifset M68K
6156 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6157 @end ifset
6158 @ifset MIPS
6159 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6160 @end ifset
6161 @ifset MMIX
6162 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6163 @end ifset
6164 @ifset MSP430
6165 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6166 @end ifset
6167 @ifset NDS32
6168 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6169 @end ifset
6170 @ifset NIOSII
6171 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6172 @end ifset
6173 @ifset POWERPC
6174 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6175 @end ifset
6176 @ifset POWERPC64
6177 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6178 @end ifset
6179 @ifset SPU
6180 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6181 @end ifset
6182 @ifset TICOFF
6183 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6184 @end ifset
6185 @ifset WIN32
6186 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6187 @end ifset
6188 @ifset XTENSA
6189 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6190 @end ifset
6191 @end menu
6192 @end ifset
6193
6194 @ifset H8300
6195 @ifclear GENERIC
6196 @raisesections
6197 @end ifclear
6198
6199 @node H8/300
6200 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6201
6202 @cindex H8/300 support
6203 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6204 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6205
6206 @table @emph
6207 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6208 @item relaxing address modes
6209 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6210 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6211 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6212 respectively.
6213
6214 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6215 @item synthesizing instructions
6216 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6217 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6218 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6219 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6220 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6221 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6222 top page of memory).
6223
6224 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6225 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6226 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6227 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6228 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6229 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6230 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6231
6232 @item bit manipulation instructions
6233 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6234 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6235 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6236 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6237 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6238 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6239 the top page of memory).
6240
6241 @item system control instructions
6242 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6243 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6244 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6245 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6246 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6247 the top page of memory).
6248 @end table
6249
6250 @ifclear GENERIC
6251 @lowersections
6252 @end ifclear
6253 @end ifset
6254
6255 @ifclear GENERIC
6256 @ifset Renesas
6257 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6258 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6259 @node Renesas
6260 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6261
6262 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6263 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6264 options are required for these chips.
6265 @end ifset
6266 @end ifclear
6267
6268 @ifset I960
6269 @ifclear GENERIC
6270 @raisesections
6271 @end ifclear
6272
6273 @node i960
6274 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6275
6276 @cindex i960 support
6277
6278 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6279 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6280 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6281 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6282 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6283 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6284 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6285
6286 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6287 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6288 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6289 the names
6290
6291 @smallexample
6292 @group
6293 try
6294 libtry.a
6295 tryca
6296 libtryca.a
6297 @end group
6298 @end smallexample
6299
6300 @noindent
6301 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6302 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6303
6304 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6305 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6306 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6307 specifies a library.
6308
6309 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6310 @cindex relaxing on i960
6311 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6312 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6313 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6314 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6315 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6316 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6317 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6318 not itself call any subroutines).
6319
6320 @ifclear GENERIC
6321 @lowersections
6322 @end ifclear
6323 @end ifset
6324
6325 @ifset ARM
6326 @ifclear GENERIC
6327 @raisesections
6328 @end ifclear
6329
6330 @ifset M68HC11
6331 @ifclear GENERIC
6332 @raisesections
6333 @end ifclear
6334
6335 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6336 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6337
6338 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6339
6340 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6341
6342 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6343 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6344
6345 @table @emph
6346 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6347 @item relaxing address modes
6348 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6349 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6350 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6351 respectively.
6352
6353 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6354 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6355 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6356
6357 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6358 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6359 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6360 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6361 @code{bset} instructions.
6362
6363 @end table
6364
6365 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6366
6367 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6368 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6369 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6370 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6371 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6372 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6373 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6374 point to the function trampoline.
6375
6376 @ifclear GENERIC
6377 @lowersections
6378 @end ifclear
6379 @end ifset
6380
6381 @node ARM
6382 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6383
6384 @cindex ARM interworking support
6385 @kindex --support-old-code
6386 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6387 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6388 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6389 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6390 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6391 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6392 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6393 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6394 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6395 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6396
6397 @cindex thumb entry point
6398 @cindex entry point, thumb
6399 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6400 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6401 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6402 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6403 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6404 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6405
6406 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6407 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6408 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6409 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6410 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6411 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6412
6413 @cindex BE8
6414 @kindex --be8
6415 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6416 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6417 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6418
6419 @cindex TARGET1
6420 @kindex --target1-rel
6421 @kindex --target1-abs
6422 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6423 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6424 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6425 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6426
6427 @cindex TARGET2
6428 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6429 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6430 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6431 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6432 @table @samp
6433 @item rel
6434 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6435 @item abs
6436 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6437 @item got-rel
6438 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6439 @end table
6440
6441 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6442 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6443 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6444 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6445 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6446 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6447
6448 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6449 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6450 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6451
6452 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6453 relocations are ignored.
6454
6455 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6456 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6457 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6458 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6459
6460 @smallexample
6461 TST rM, #1
6462 MOVEQ PC, rM
6463 BX Rn
6464 @end smallexample
6465
6466 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6467 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6468 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6469
6470 @cindex USE_BLX
6471 @kindex --use-blx
6472 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6473 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6474 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6475 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6476 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6477
6478 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6479 specify it if you are using that target.
6480
6481 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6482 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6483 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6484 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6485 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6486 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6487 the support code can read the intended values.
6488
6489 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6490 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6491 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6492 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6493 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6494 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6495
6496 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6497 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6498 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6499 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6500 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6501 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6502
6503 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6504 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6505 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6506 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6507 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6508 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6509 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6510
6511 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6512 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6513 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6514 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6515 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6516 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6517 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6518
6519 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6520 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6521 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6522
6523 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6524 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6525 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6526 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6527 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6528 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6529 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6530 not be diagnosed.
6531
6532 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6533 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6534 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6535 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6536 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6537 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6538 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6539
6540 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6541 @kindex --pic-veneer
6542 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6543 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6544 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6545 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6546
6547 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6548 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6549 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6550 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6551 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6552 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6553 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6554 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6555 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6556 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6557 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6558 where they should be placed.
6559
6560 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6561 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6562 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6563 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6564 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6565 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6566 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6567 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6568 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6569 from the input sections.
6570
6571 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6572 @samp{N = +1}.
6573
6574 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6575 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6576 otherwise.
6577
6578 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6579 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6580 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6581 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6582
6583 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6584
6585 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6586 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6587 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6588 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6589
6590 Please contact ARM for further details.
6591
6592 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6593 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6594 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6595 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6596
6597 @kindex --long-plt
6598 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6599 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6600 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6601 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6602
6603 @ifclear GENERIC
6604 @lowersections
6605 @end ifclear
6606 @end ifset
6607
6608 @ifset HPPA
6609 @ifclear GENERIC
6610 @raisesections
6611 @end ifclear
6612
6613 @node HPPA ELF32
6614 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6615 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6616 @kindex --multi-subspace
6617 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6618 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6619 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6620 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6621 multiple sub-spaces.
6622
6623 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6624 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6625 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6626 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6627 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6628 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6629 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6630 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6631 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6632 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6633 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6634 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6635 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6636 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6637 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6638 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6639
6640 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6641 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6642 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6643 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6644
6645 @ifclear GENERIC
6646 @lowersections
6647 @end ifclear
6648 @end ifset
6649
6650 @ifset M68K
6651 @ifclear GENERIC
6652 @raisesections
6653 @end ifclear
6654
6655 @node M68K
6656 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6657
6658 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6659 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6660 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6661 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6662 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6663 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6664 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6665 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6666 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6667 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6668 support such GOTs.
6669 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6670 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6671 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6672 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6673
6674 @ifclear GENERIC
6675 @lowersections
6676 @end ifclear
6677 @end ifset
6678
6679 @ifset MIPS
6680 @ifclear GENERIC
6681 @raisesections
6682 @end ifclear
6683
6684 @node MIPS
6685 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6686
6687 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6688 @kindex --insn32
6689 @kindex --no-insn32
6690 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6691 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6692 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6693 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6694 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6695 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6696
6697 @ifclear GENERIC
6698 @lowersections
6699 @end ifclear
6700 @end ifset
6701
6702 @ifset MMIX
6703 @ifclear GENERIC
6704 @raisesections
6705 @end ifclear
6706
6707 @node MMIX
6708 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6709 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6710 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6711 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6712 can translate between the two formats.
6713
6714 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6715 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6716 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6717 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6718 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6719 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6720 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6721 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6722
6723 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6724 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6725 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6726 of a section.
6727
6728 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6729 are left out from an mmo file.
6730
6731 @ifclear GENERIC
6732 @lowersections
6733 @end ifclear
6734 @end ifset
6735
6736 @ifset MSP430
6737 @ifclear GENERIC
6738 @raisesections
6739 @end ifclear
6740
6741 @node MSP430
6742 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6743 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6744 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6745 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6746
6747 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6748 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6749
6750 @table @code
6751 @item @samp{.vectors}
6752 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6753
6754 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6755 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6756 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6757
6758 @item @samp{.infomem}
6759 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6760 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6761
6762 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6763 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6764 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6765
6766 @item @samp{.noinit}
6767 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6768
6769 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6770 @end table
6771
6772 @ifclear GENERIC
6773 @lowersections
6774 @end ifclear
6775 @end ifset
6776
6777 @ifset NDS32
6778 @ifclear GENERIC
6779 @raisesections
6780 @end ifclear
6781
6782 @node NDS32
6783 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6784 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6785 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6786 relaxes objects according to these options.
6787
6788 @table @code
6789 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6790 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6791
6792 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6793 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6794
6795 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6796 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6797
6798 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6799 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6800
6801 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6802 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6803
6804 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6805 Update the existing EX9 table.
6806
6807 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6808 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6809
6810 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6811 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6812
6813 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6814 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6815
6816 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6817 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6818 @end table
6819
6820 @ifclear GENERIC
6821 @lowersections
6822 @end ifclear
6823 @end ifset
6824
6825 @ifset NIOSII
6826 @ifclear GENERIC
6827 @raisesections
6828 @end ifclear
6829
6830 @node Nios II
6831 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6832 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
6833 @kindex --relax on Nios II
6834
6835 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6836 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6837 which may result in @command{ld} giving
6838 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6839 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6840 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6841 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6842 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6843 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6844 larger than 256MB.
6845
6846 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6847 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6848 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6849 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6850 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6851 register as a temporary.
6852
6853 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6854 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6855 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6856
6857 @ifclear GENERIC
6858 @lowersections
6859 @end ifclear
6860 @end ifset
6861
6862 @ifset POWERPC
6863 @ifclear GENERIC
6864 @raisesections
6865 @end ifclear
6866
6867 @node PowerPC ELF32
6868 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6869 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6870 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6871 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6872 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6873 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6874 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6875 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6876 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6877 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6878 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6879 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6880 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6881
6882 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6883 @table @option
6884 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6885 @kindex --bss-plt
6886 @item --bss-plt
6887 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6888 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6889 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6890 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6891 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6892 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6893 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6894 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6895
6896 @kindex --secure-plt
6897 @item --secure-plt
6898 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6899 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6900 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6901 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6902 style BSS PLT.
6903
6904 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6905 @kindex --sdata-got
6906 @item --sdata-got
6907 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6908 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6909 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6910 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6911 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6912 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6913 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6914 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6915 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6916 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6917 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6918 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6919
6920 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6921 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6922 @item --emit-stub-syms
6923 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6924 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6925
6926 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6927 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6928 @item --no-tls-optimize
6929 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6930 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6931 disable the optimization.
6932 @end table
6933
6934 @ifclear GENERIC
6935 @lowersections
6936 @end ifclear
6937 @end ifset
6938
6939 @ifset POWERPC64
6940 @ifclear GENERIC
6941 @raisesections
6942 @end ifclear
6943
6944 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6945 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6946
6947 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6948 @table @option
6949 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6950 @kindex --stub-group-size
6951 @item --stub-group-size
6952 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6953 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6954 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6955 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6956 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6957 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6958 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6959 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6960 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6961 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6962 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6963 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6964 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6965 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6966
6967 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6968 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6969 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6970 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6971
6972 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6973 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6974 @item --emit-stub-syms
6975 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6976 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6977
6978 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6979 @kindex --dotsyms
6980 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6981 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6982 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6983 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6984 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6985 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6986 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6987 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6988 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6989 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6990 feature.
6991
6992 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6993 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6994 @item --no-tls-optimize
6995 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6996 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6997 disable the optimization.
6998
6999 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7000 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7001 @item --no-opd-optimize
7002 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7003 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7004 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7005 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7006
7007 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7008 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7009 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7010 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7011 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7012 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7013 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7014
7015 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7016 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7017 @item --no-toc-optimize
7018 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7019 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7020 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7021 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7022 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7023 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7024 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7025 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7026 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7027 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7028 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7029 optimization.
7030
7031 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7032 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7033 @item --no-multi-toc
7034 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7035 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7036 where TOC
7037 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7038 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7039 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7040 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7041 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7042 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7043 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7044 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7045
7046 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7047 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7048 @item --no-toc-sort
7049 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7050 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7051 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7052 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7053 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7054 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7055 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7056 off this feature.
7057
7058 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7059 @kindex --plt-align
7060 @kindex --no-plt-align
7061 @item --plt-align
7062 @itemx --no-plt-align
7063 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7064 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7065 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7066 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7067 stubs are packed tightly.
7068
7069 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7070 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7071 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7072 @item --plt-static-chain
7073 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7074 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7075 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7076 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7077
7078 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7079 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7080 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7081 @item --plt-thread-safe
7082 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7083 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7084 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7085 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7086 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7087 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7088 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7089 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7090 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7091 default behaviour.
7092 @end table
7093
7094 @ifclear GENERIC
7095 @lowersections
7096 @end ifclear
7097 @end ifset
7098
7099 @ifset SPU
7100 @ifclear GENERIC
7101 @raisesections
7102 @end ifclear
7103
7104 @node SPU ELF
7105 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7106
7107 @cindex SPU ELF options
7108 @table @option
7109
7110 @cindex SPU plugins
7111 @kindex --plugin
7112 @item --plugin
7113 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7114
7115 @cindex SPU overlays
7116 @kindex --no-overlays
7117 @item --no-overlays
7118 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7119 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7120 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7121 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7122
7123 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7124 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7125 @item --emit-stub-syms
7126 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7127 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7128
7129 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7130 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7131 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7132 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7133 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7134 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7135
7136 @cindex SPU local store size
7137 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7138 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7139 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7140 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7141 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7142
7143 @cindex SPU
7144 @kindex --stack-analysis
7145 @item --stack-analysis
7146 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7147 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7148 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7149 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7150 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7151 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7152 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7153 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7154 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7155 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7156 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7157 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7158 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7159 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7160 and calls will be given.
7161
7162 @cindex SPU
7163 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7164 @item --emit-stack-syms
7165 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7166 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7167 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7168 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7169 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7170 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7171 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7172 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7173 @end table
7174
7175 @ifclear GENERIC
7176 @lowersections
7177 @end ifclear
7178 @end ifset
7179
7180 @ifset TICOFF
7181 @ifclear GENERIC
7182 @raisesections
7183 @end ifclear
7184
7185 @node TI COFF
7186 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7187 @cindex TI COFF versions
7188 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7189 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7190 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7191 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7192 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7193 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7194
7195 @ifclear GENERIC
7196 @lowersections
7197 @end ifclear
7198 @end ifset
7199
7200 @ifset WIN32
7201 @ifclear GENERIC
7202 @raisesections
7203 @end ifclear
7204
7205 @node WIN32
7206 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7207
7208 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7209 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7210 command line options mentioned here.
7211
7212 @table @emph
7213 @cindex import libraries
7214 @item import libraries
7215 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7216 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7217 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7218 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7219 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7220 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7221
7222 @item exporting DLL symbols
7223 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7224 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7225
7226 @table @emph
7227 @item using auto-export functionality
7228 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7229 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7230 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7231
7232 @itemize
7233 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7234 @item --exclude-symbols
7235 @item --exclude-libs
7236 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7237 @item --version-script
7238 @end itemize
7239
7240 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7241 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7242 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7243 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7244 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7245 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7246 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7247 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7248
7249 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7250 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7251 if either of the following are true:
7252
7253 @itemize
7254 @item A DEF file is used.
7255 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7256 @end itemize
7257
7258 @item using a DEF file
7259 @cindex using a DEF file
7260 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7261 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7262 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7263 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7264 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7265
7266 @example
7267 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7268 @end example
7269
7270 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7271 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7272
7273 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7274
7275 @example
7276 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7277
7278 EXPORTS
7279 foo
7280 bar
7281 _bar = bar
7282 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7283 var1 DATA
7284 doo = foo == foo2
7285 eoo DATA == var1
7286 @end example
7287
7288 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7289 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7290 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7291 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7292 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7293 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7294 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7295 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7296 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7297
7298 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7299 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7300 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7301
7302 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7303 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7304 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7305 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7306
7307 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7308 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7309 non-default base address for the image.
7310
7311 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7312 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7313 filename specified on the command line.
7314
7315 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7316
7317 @example
7318 EXPORTS
7319 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7320 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7321 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7322 @end example
7323
7324 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7325 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7326 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7327 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7328 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7329 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7330 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7331
7332 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7333
7334 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7335 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7336 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7337 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7338 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7339
7340 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7341 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7342 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7343 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7344
7345 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7346 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7347 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7348 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7349 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7350 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7351 application will behave unexpectedly.
7352
7353 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7354 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7355 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7356 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7357 the DLL without an import library.
7358
7359 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7360 other DEF file statements
7361
7362 @cindex creating a DEF file
7363 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7364 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7365
7366 @item Using decorations
7367 @cindex Using decorations
7368 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7369 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7370 declared as:
7371
7372 @example
7373 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7374 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7375 @end example
7376
7377 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7378 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7379 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7380 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7381
7382 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7383 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7384 instead:
7385
7386 @example
7387 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7388 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7389 @end example
7390
7391 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7392 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7393 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7394 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7395 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7396 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7397 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7398 information.
7399 @end table
7400
7401 @cindex automatic data imports
7402 @item automatic data imports
7403 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7404 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7405 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7406 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7407 code to these platforms, especially for large
7408 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7409 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7410 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7411 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7412 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7413 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7414 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7415 trigger the feature's use.
7416
7417 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7418 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7419
7420 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7421 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7422
7423 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7424 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7425 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7426 below.
7427
7428 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7429 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7430 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7431 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7432 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7433 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7434 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7435 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7436 references.
7437
7438 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7439 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7440 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7441 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7442 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7443 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7444 run without error on an older system.
7445
7446 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7447 enabled as needed.
7448
7449 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7450 @item direct linking to a dll
7451 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7452 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7453 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7454 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7455 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7456 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7457 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7458 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7459 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7460 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7461
7462 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7463 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7464 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7465 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7466 select the dll instead of an import library.
7467
7468
7469 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7470 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7471
7472 @example
7473 libxxx.dll.a
7474 xxx.dll.a
7475 libxxx.a
7476 xxx.lib
7477 cygxxx.dll (*)
7478 libxxx.dll
7479 xxx.dll
7480 @end example
7481
7482 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7483
7484 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7485 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7486 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7487 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7488 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7489
7490 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7491 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7492 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7493 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7494 could coexist on the same machine.
7495
7496 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7497 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7498 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7499
7500 @example
7501 bin/
7502 cygxxx.dll
7503 lib/
7504 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7505 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7506 @end example
7507
7508 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7509 done two ways:
7510
7511 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7512 @example
7513 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7514 @end example
7515
7516 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7517 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7518 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7519 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7520
7521 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7522 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7523 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7524 making the app/dll.
7525
7526 @example
7527 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7528 @end example
7529
7530 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7531
7532 @example
7533 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7534 @end example
7535
7536 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7537 perfectly legal
7538
7539 @example
7540 bin/
7541 cygxxx-5.dll
7542 lib/
7543 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7544 @end example
7545
7546 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7547 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7548 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7549
7550 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7551 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7552
7553 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7554 work with auto-imported data.
7555
7556 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7557 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7558 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7559 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7560 possible to do this without an import lib.
7561
7562 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7563 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7564 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7565 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7566
7567 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7568 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7569 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7570 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7571 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7572 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7573 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7574
7575 @item symbol aliasing
7576 @table @emph
7577 @item adding additional names
7578 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7579 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7580 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7581 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7582 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7583
7584 @example
7585 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7586
7587 EXPORTS
7588 foo
7589 _foo = foo
7590 @end example
7591
7592 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7593
7594 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7595 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7596
7597 @example
7598 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7599 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7600 @end example
7601
7602 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7603 symbols.
7604
7605 @item renaming symbols
7606 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7607 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7608 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7609 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7610 created). In the following example:
7611
7612 @example
7613 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7614
7615 EXPORTS
7616 _foo = foo
7617 @end example
7618
7619 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7620 @samp{_foo}.
7621 @end table
7622
7623 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7624 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7625 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7626 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7627 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7628 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7629 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7630 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7631 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7632 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7633 which is probably not what you wanted.
7634
7635 @cindex weak externals
7636 @item weak externals
7637 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7638 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7639 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7640 are three variants of weak externals:
7641 @itemize
7642 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7643 called lazy externals.
7644 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7645 This form is not presently implemented.
7646 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7647 implemented.
7648 @end itemize
7649 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7650 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7651 uses a default value.
7652
7653 @cindex aligned common symbols
7654 @item aligned common symbols
7655 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7656 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7657 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7658 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7659 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7660 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7661 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7662 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7663
7664 @end table
7665
7666 @ifclear GENERIC
7667 @lowersections
7668 @end ifclear
7669 @end ifset
7670
7671 @ifset XTENSA
7672 @ifclear GENERIC
7673 @raisesections
7674 @end ifclear
7675
7676 @node Xtensa
7677 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7678
7679 @cindex Xtensa processors
7680 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7681 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7682 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7683 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7684 example, with the command:
7685
7686 @smallexample
7687 SECTIONS
7688 @{
7689 .text : @{
7690 *(.literal .text)
7691 @}
7692 @}
7693 @end smallexample
7694
7695 @noindent
7696 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7697 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7698 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7699 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7700 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7701 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7702 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7703
7704 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7705 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7706 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7707 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7708 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7709 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7710 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7711 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7712 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7713 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7714 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7715 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7716
7717 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7718 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7719 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7720 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7721 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7722 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7723 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7724 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7725 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7726 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7727 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7728 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7729 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7730 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7731
7732 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7733 control the linker:
7734
7735 @cindex Xtensa options
7736 @table @option
7737 @item --size-opt
7738 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7739 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7740 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7741 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7742 preserve the correctness of the code.
7743 @end table
7744
7745 @ifclear GENERIC
7746 @lowersections
7747 @end ifclear
7748 @end ifset
7749
7750 @ifclear SingleFormat
7751 @node BFD
7752 @chapter BFD
7753
7754 @cindex back end
7755 @cindex object file management
7756 @cindex object formats available
7757 @kindex objdump -i
7758 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7759 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7760 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7761 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7762 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7763 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7764 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7765 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7766 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7767
7768 @cindex BFD requirements
7769 @cindex requirements for BFD
7770 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7771 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7772 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7773 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7774 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7775 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7776 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7777
7778 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7779 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7780 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7781 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7782
7783 @menu
7784 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7785 @end menu
7786
7787 @node BFD outline
7788 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7789 @cindex opening object files
7790 @include bfdsumm.texi
7791 @end ifclear
7792
7793 @node Reporting Bugs
7794 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7795 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7796 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7797
7798 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7799
7800 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7801 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7802 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7803 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7804 @command{ld}.
7805
7806 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7807 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7808
7809 @menu
7810 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7811 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7812 @end menu
7813
7814 @node Bug Criteria
7815 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7816 @cindex bug criteria
7817
7818 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7819
7820 @itemize @bullet
7821 @cindex fatal signal
7822 @cindex linker crash
7823 @cindex crash of linker
7824 @item
7825 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7826 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7827
7828 @cindex error on valid input
7829 @item
7830 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7831
7832 @cindex invalid input
7833 @item
7834 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7835 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7836 object files are correct.
7837
7838 @item
7839 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7840 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7841 @end itemize
7842
7843 @node Bug Reporting
7844 @section How to Report Bugs
7845 @cindex bug reports
7846 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7847
7848 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7849 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7850 recommend you contact that organization first.
7851
7852 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7853 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7854 distribution.
7855
7856 @ifset BUGURL
7857 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7858 @value{BUGURL}.
7859 @end ifset
7860
7861 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7862 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7863 fact or leave it out, state it!
7864
7865 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7866 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7867 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7868 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7869 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7870 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7871 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7872 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7873 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7874 and the most helpful.
7875
7876 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7877 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7878 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7879
7880 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7881 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7882 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7883 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7884
7885 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7886
7887 @itemize @bullet
7888 @item
7889 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7890 the @samp{--version} argument.
7891
7892 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7893 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7894
7895 @item
7896 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7897 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7898
7899 @item
7900 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7901 version number.
7902
7903 @item
7904 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7905 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7906
7907 @item
7908 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7909 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7910 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7911 sufficient.
7912
7913 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7914 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7915
7916 @item
7917 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7918 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7919 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7920 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7921 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7922 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7923 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7924 attachments are best.
7925
7926 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7927 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7928 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7929 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7930 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7931
7932 @item
7933 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7934 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7935
7936 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7937 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7938 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7939 a chance to make a mistake.
7940
7941 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7942 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7943 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7944 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7945 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7946 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7947 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7948 any conclusion from our observations.
7949
7950 @item
7951 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7952 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7953 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7954 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7955 context, not by line number.
7956
7957 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7958 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7959 @end itemize
7960
7961 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7962
7963 @itemize @bullet
7964 @item
7965 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7966
7967 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7968 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7969 changes will not affect it.
7970
7971 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7972 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7973 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7974 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7975
7976 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7977 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7978 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7979 less time, and so on.
7980
7981 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7982 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7983
7984 @item
7985 A patch for the bug.
7986
7987 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7988 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7989 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7990 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7991
7992 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7993 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7994 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7995 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7996 fixed.
7997
7998 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7999 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8000 help us to understand.
8001
8002 @item
8003 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8004
8005 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8006 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8007 @end itemize
8008
8009 @node MRI
8010 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8011 @cindex MRI compatibility
8012 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8013 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8014 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8015 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8016 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8017 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8018 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8019
8020 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8021 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8022 features to make use of them.
8023
8024 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8025 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8026
8027 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8028 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8029 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8030 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8031 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8032
8033 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8034
8035 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8036 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8037 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8038
8039 @table @code
8040 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8041 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8042 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8043 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8044 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8045 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8046 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8047 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8048 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8049 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8050 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8051
8052 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8053 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8054 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8055 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8056
8057 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8058
8059 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8060 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8061 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8062 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8063
8064 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8065 @item BASE @var{expression}
8066 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8067 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8068
8069 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8070 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8071 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8072 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8073
8074 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8075 @item END
8076 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8077
8078 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8079 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8080 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8081 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8082
8083 @enumerate
8084 @item
8085 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8086
8087 @item
8088 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8089
8090 @item
8091 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8092 @samp{COFF}
8093 @end enumerate
8094
8095 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8096 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8097 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8098 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8099
8100 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8101 same line, with no change in its effect.
8102
8103 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8104 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8105 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8106 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8107 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8108 command line.
8109
8110 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8111 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8112 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8113 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8114 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8115
8116 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8117 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8118 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8119 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8120 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8121 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8122 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8123 file, in the order specified.
8124
8125 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8126 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8127 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8128 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8129 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8130 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8131
8132 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8133 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8134 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8135 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8136 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8137 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8138 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8139 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8140 @end table
8141
8142 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8143 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8144 @include fdl.texi
8145
8146 @node LD Index
8147 @unnumbered LD Index
8148
8149 @printindex cp
8150
8151 @tex
8152 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8153 % meantime:
8154 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8155 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8156 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8157 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8158 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8159 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8160 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8161 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8162 \page\colophon
8163 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8164 @end tex
8165
8166 @bye
This page took 0.249844 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.